2008 MK74 Patriot Owner Manual

2008 MK74 Patriot Owner Manual
2008 Patriot
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
81-326-0812
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Patriot
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
.............................................................3 1
1
INTRODUCTION
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
10
INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
m Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance, and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused to go out of
control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this
vehicle is out of control it may rollover when some other
vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
INTRODUCTION
5
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
1
6
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left
front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the
windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
registration or title.
7
1
Vehicle Identification Number
8
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .18
m Steering Wheel Lock — Manual Transmission
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . .14
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .14
m Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .19
m Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .20
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . .22
m Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .22
m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .40
m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ “Child-Protection” Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
m Power Windows— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .67
11
m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
Manual Transaxle
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Ignition Key Positions
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION ONLY
Your manual transmission vehicle is equipped with a
passive steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering
the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel
is moved no more than 1/2 turn in either direction and
the key is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel
will lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
15
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with some after-market remote starting systems. Use
of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder-equipped components on the
same key chain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit PIN number. Keep the PIN in a secure
location. This number is required for dealer replacement
of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one, which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the “ON” position for at least 3
seconds, but no longer than 15-seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the
first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 15
seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and remove the second key.
17
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete,
the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry
Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The system monitors the doors, hood, liftgate, and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal
with the horn for 30 seconds and the lights for 60
seconds. If the triggering device is not deactivated the
horn will sound again after a 5 second delay for another
30 seconds. If the trigger remains present this cycle will
repeat for up to 5 minutes.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
To Set the Alarm
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch,
or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all doors.
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically
disarm. After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash
slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
To Disarm the System
19
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
maximum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
1. Press UNLOCK on the Keyless Entry Transmitter.
2. Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will
disarm the system. A valid key is one that is programmed
to that particular vehicle. A valid key will disarm the
system, an invalid key will allow the engine to run for 2
seconds and stop.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
Three Button Transmitter
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to “Personal Settings” in
the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section of this manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles
perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
21
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock”
NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to 9Personal Settings9 in
the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC - equipped
vehicles perform the following steps:
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
two key fob transmitters programmed only for that
vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all
other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have
to reprogram them for your vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key:
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
9. A single chime will be heard.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the fob.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard.
11. A single chime will be heard.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional fobs.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
removal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
DOOR LOCKS
Separating Transmitter Halves
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
CAUTION!
Manual Door Lock Plunger
WARNING!
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver door panel.
Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
27
Automatic Door Locks—If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Power Door Lock Switches
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
following procedure:
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
Auto Unlock
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
4. Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle.
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Ignition Key Position
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
29
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
Ignition Key Position
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
“Child-Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) — If Equipped
Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the lock or unlock position.
Inserting Ignition Key
Child Protection Door Lock Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
31
POWER WINDOWS— IF EQUIPPED
Power Window Switches
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
2
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
Power Window Switch Location
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger tip control of all four power windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
windows will operate only when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, ACC position, and for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s
door is opened. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories
Until Exit” under the “Understanding your Instrument
Panel” section.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Auto Down
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Lock Out Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
2
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by
activating the power door lock switches located on the
front doors. The central locking/unlocking feature (if
equipped) can also be activated from the liftgate key
cylinder.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Opening The Liftgate
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction, or the
remote transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual lock
models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the liftgate
open with one fluid motion.
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,
the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap-in
cap that provides access to release the latch in the event
of an electrical system malfunction.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING!
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if
equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front
passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
35
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries.
Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more likely
to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
39
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Positioning Lap Belt
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves
you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Anchorage
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a three
point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle, which allows
the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini buckle and shoulder belt can
then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel
for added convenience.
1. Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
2
Mini Latch Stowage
2. Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini
latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
43
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the belt in a collision.
Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle
7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini latch plate into the slot
provided in the trim panel.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
Detaching Mini Latch and Buckle
10. To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini buckle. The belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control
Module (refer to information on Airbags in this section).
Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
45
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler Corporation does
not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver or
front passenger seat belt at least three times within 10
seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender,
and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
47
2
Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity.
This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain
airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain
airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Side Curtain Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers
or attempt to manually open them. You may damage the
airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are
no longer functional. These protective covers for the
airbag cushions are designed to open only when the
airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags, do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
the location of the side curtain airbag. The area where the
side curtain airbag is located should remain free from
any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will alter
the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do
not add roof racks that require permanent attachments
(bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do
not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as
alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.
49
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side Curtain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the Side Curtain Airbag on
the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where
the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in
the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly.
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
up in the rear seat.
2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury
or death to infants in that position.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint
in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.
4. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section).
6. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
9. If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean
against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the
space between you and the door.
10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the 9If
You Need Customer Assistance9 section in this manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
51
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Front Passenger Airbag
• If the vehicle has side curtain airbags, they also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door
or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Instrument Panel
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows (If Equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Seatbelt Reminder Light
• Knee Impact Bolsters
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. This ORC will
detect roll over.
• The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.
• The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When
the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way, as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The
driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag
gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the
airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
53
• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When
the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision
requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals
the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity
of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain
airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time that it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the side curtain
airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The
side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm)
thick when it is inflated.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC
detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the
driver and front passenger, and then to immediately
deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following functions:
55
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• Flashes hazard lights.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
• Cuts off fuel to the engine.
• Unlocks the doors automatically
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to 5 - seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near-deployment, and
up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data
during and/or after air bag deployment or neardeployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about
the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in
order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In
addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be requested
by customers, insurance carriers, government officials,
and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance
organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
57
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of
DaimlerChrysler product
litigation
involving
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
a
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Cruise control status
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Traction/stability control status
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seatbelt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
• Tire pressure monitoring system status
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
59
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
NOTE:
For additional
www.seatcheck.org.
information
refer
to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
61
WARNING!
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an automatic locking mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
distinctive label. To operate the switchable retractor,
please refer to Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) in this
section.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed
from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the
retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacture.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
63
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of
lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible
child seats such that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the
outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat
belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to,
Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions.
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Rear Seat LATCH
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
65
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
67
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the deck lid / liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
69
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, transmission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .75
▫ Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . .77
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped .77
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
3
m Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
72
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Manual Lumbar— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Driver’s Seat Back Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 113
m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Off-Road Lights – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
73
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
m Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 126
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . . 132
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Programming HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 141
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Using HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkt Button . . 142
m Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If Equipped . . . 129
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
m Electronic Brake Control System –
ABS/TCS/BAS/ERM/HDC/ESP . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System – ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3
74
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
m Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Opening The Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Cargo Light/Removable Self Recharging
Flashlight – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Closing The Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Venting Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
m Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . . 148
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 150
m Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Removable Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Fold Down Speakers – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 156
m Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
m Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 159
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
75
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
3
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side
Adjust the flat (Driver’s Side) outside mirror to center on
the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the
view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex ( Passenger’s Side) outside mirror to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap
of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Passenger Side Mirror Directions
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
77
Power Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
3
Folding the Outside Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved,
manually, either forward or rearward to resist damage.
The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward, and normal.
Remote Control Mirrors Switch
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
WARNING!
Passenger Side Mirror Directions
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward.
79
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
version 0.96 or higher. See UConnect™ website for supported phones.
Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
NOTE: For UConnect™ customer support, visit the
following web sites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phone book enables you to store up to
32 names and four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phone book accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button) that will
enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
81
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
UConnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect™
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt or another
prompt.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on
certain radios.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
example, you can use the combined form voice command 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following
the beep. The UConnect™ system will play all the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the “Phone” button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the “Phone” button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9 and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. The UConnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for
pairing.
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9 and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
83
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
Connectivity9).
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
• For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.9
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previously
stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone book. Refer
to 9Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook,9 to
learn how to store a name in the phone book.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phone book is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook New Entry.9
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or
9Robert9 instead of 9Bob.9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
9Home,9 9Work,9 9Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phone book
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phone book entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phone book with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phone book accessible
only in that language.
85
Phonebook Download
UConnect™ allows the user to download entries from
their phone via Bluetooth. To use this feature, press the
“Phone” button and say “Phonebook Download.” System prompts “Ready to accept vcard entry via Bluetooth…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook
entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object
Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone owners’
manual for specific instructions on how to send these
entries from your phone.
NOTE:
• Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth,
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to
the UConnect™ and then send the address book entry
via Bluetooth. Please see your phone owners’ manual
for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth
connection.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phone book
entry that you wish to edit.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it
will be use only the first 24 characters.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phone book entry that you are editing.
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phone book entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Delete.9
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phone book
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phone book
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say 9Delete.9
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
87
• Note that only the phone book entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Erase All.9
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phone book entries will be
deleted.
• Note that only the phone book in the current language
is deleted.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phone book entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and say 9Call.9
NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9
operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press ’Phone’ button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phone book
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
89
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to 9Toggling Between Calls.9 To combine two calls,
refer to 9Conference Call.9
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the 8Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
“Phone” button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the “Phone” button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the “Phone” button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recognition” button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under 9Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
established, press and hold the “Phone” button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “Phone”
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the “Phone” button until you hear a single
beep.
Redial
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Redial.9
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect™ system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
91
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phone book
is usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Towing Assistance.9
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page refer to 9Working with Automated
Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
93
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the “Voice Recognition”
button and say 93 7 4 6 # Send.9 Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number, say the name of the phonebook entry
you wish to send. The UConnect™ will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations, this is normal.
a{,9 you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• Some paging and voicemail systems have system
timeout settings too short that may not allow the use
of this feature.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
95
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
• Following the beep, say 9Mute.9
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
• Following the beep, say 9Mute-off.9
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the “Voice
Recognition” button and say 9Transfer Call.9
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately within 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
97
• At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
UConnect™ Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
“Phone” button and say “UConnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect™ system Voice Training feature may be used. To
enter this training mode, follow one of the two procedures:
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
From outside the UConnect™ mode (e.g. from radio
mode)
• Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say 9Setup,
Voice Training9 command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect™ system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• For best performance, adjust the rear view mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 inch (1 cm) gap between the
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9
• Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phone book.
• UConnect™ phone book nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phone book.
99
• You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• dry weather condition.
• operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
103
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts.
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
105
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SEATS
Front Seat Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
Front Seat Adjustment
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
107
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat to
adjust the driving position.
3
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seat Height Adjustment
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Lumbar— If Equipped
The Lumbar adjustment is located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat. To increase or decrease support,
rotate the handle up or down.
Driver’s Seat Back Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back
to the desired position and release the handle.
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
Lumbar Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the button
and push down on the head restraint.
3
Reclining Seat
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
Head Restraint Adjustment
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
This feature heats the front driver’s and passenger’s
seats. The controls for the heater is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio. After turning on the
ignition, you may choose OFF, HIGH, or LOW heat
settings. An indicator on the switch shows which setting
has been chosen.
Heated Seat Switches
• Pressing the switch once will select highlevel heating.
• Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level
heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the
heating elements off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after about 30 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
automatically after about 30 minutes.
111
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
3
NOTE: If the high heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within 2 to 3 minutes.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Control
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the
seat forward and flat.
Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat
Folding Rear Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
3
Rear Seat Folded Flat
Rear Seat Recline Pull
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the
seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees
maximum, and release the strap.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Reclining The Rear Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located on the left kick panel.
3
Secondary Hood Latch
Primary Hood Latch
Then move the safety catch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
facing hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the
hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the
location stamped into the inner hood surface.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cm (8 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
light OFF. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
Multi-Function Control Lever
The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
117
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation.
Headlight Control
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control
Lever up or down.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is on, the engine is running, the headlight switch
is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and
the gear shift is in any position except park.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
119
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
3
Front Fog Lights Control
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the control lever.
Turn Signal Control
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
High Beam Control
Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to Low beam.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in
the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds
for the next flash to pass operation.
121
Off-Road lights – If equipped
CAUTION!
The auxiliary lights mounted on the front bumper
should be illuminated during “Off-Road Use Only”.
Having them illuminated on public streets, highways, roads, etc. may be illegal in your state. Your
state may also require auxiliary lights to be covered
when operating your vehicle on public streets, highways, roads, etc. Further illuminating these lights
with supplied covers installed could cause permanent damage to the lamps or covers. Before using
these auxiliary lights, contact your State Authorities
for proper operation and use of these lights.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The auxiliary Off-Road lights can be turned on by
pressing the top of the switch when Off-Road conditions
require additional lighting. To turn off the auxiliary lights
press the bottom of the switch.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Off-Road Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Rear Washer control
Mist Control
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper
speed.
Wiper Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the knob upward
(clockwise) to decrease the delay time and downward
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
(counterclockwise) to increase the delay time. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18
seconds between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the steering column, push down on the lever below
the turn signal control lever. With one hand firmly on the
wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired.
Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place.
3
Tilting Steering Column Control
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The
speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Speed Control Location
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
127
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake or clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch
erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the “RESUME
ACCEL” lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding “RESUME ACCEL”. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping “RESUME ACCEL” once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold “SET DECEL”. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the “SET DECEL” button once will result in a 1
mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
Manual Transaxle
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed
control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) – IF
EQUIPPED
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
129
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM –
ABS/TCS/BAS/ERM/HDC/ESP
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System ( BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Descent Control (HDC) and Electronic
Stability Program (ESP). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP.
Anti-Lock Brake System – ABS
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in this Section of the
manual for more information about ABS.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in
either the “Partial Off” or “ESP Off” modes. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP)” in this Section of this
manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
131
WARNING!
• BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM can not
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped
This system maintains vehicle speed while descending
hills during off-road driving situations. HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to
between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depending
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
on terrain. The system is activated by placing the vehicle
in “Off-Road” mode and placing the gear selector in
“Low” or “Reverse.”
When the system is available, the HDC indicator lamp will be illuminated solid.
HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only
activate when the vehicle is descending a hill. It will not
activate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be fully
deactivated in by putting the vehicle into ESP “full off”
mode (refer to the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
located in the “Electronic Brake Control” section of this
manual). This is done by pressing and holding the ESP
OFF button for 5 seconds.
HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
133
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like
normal. When either the brake or the accelerator is
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the original set speed.
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. At
vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h) HDC will no
longer function. If the HDC indicator lamp begins to
flash it means that the brakes are getting too hot and the
vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake
of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
• ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
• The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ESP 2WD Operating Modes
All 2WD vehicles can choose the following ESP operating
modes:
ESP ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “ESP
Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
PARTIAL ESP
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
“ESP Control Switch”. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
TCS portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally, with the
exception of engine power reduction. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or
135
gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would
normally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the “ESP
Control Switch”. This will restore the normal “ESP On”
mode of operation.
WARNING!
In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
ESP 4WD Operating Modes
In addition to ESP ON and Partial ESP (described above
in “ESP 2WD Operating Modes”), all 4WD equipped
vehicles can also choose the following ESP operating
mode:
ESP OFF
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
depressing and holding the “ESP Control Switch” for 5
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After 5 seconds, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
will illuminate and the “ESP Off” message will appear in
the odometer. Press and release the trip odometer button
located on the instrument cluster to clear this message.
In this mode, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At 35
mph (56 km/h) the normal ESP stability function returns
with the exception of engine power reduction. TCS
remains off. When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph
(48 km/h) the ESP system shuts off. ESP is off at low
vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road
driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability
feature at speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” will always be illuminated when
ESP is off.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the
“ESP Control Switch”. This will restore the
normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
137
WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not engage to
assist in maintaining stability. “ESP Off” mode is
intended for off-highway or off-road use, only.
NOTE:
• The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off of your vehicle’s battery.
NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Theft
Alarm is active.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not
train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a
garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse”
feature as required by federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener
without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–
3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLinkT
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
139
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLinkt button you wish to program.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (3–8 cm) away
from the HomeLinkt button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLinkt button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLinkt indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLinkt
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Watch for the HomeLinkt indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open & close while you train.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step #3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
• After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the garage door
does not operate with HomeLinkt and the garage door
opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door
opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed to the
heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLinkt button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with programming for Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open & close the door).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for 2 seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for 2 seconds) to complete the training.
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink.” earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
Using HomeLinkT
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkT Button
To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with PROGRAMMING HOMELINK Step #2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
143
• Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
145
Opening the Sunroof
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
Express Mode
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, the stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing the Sunroof
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Again, any release of the switch will
stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partial close condition until the switch is pushed and
held forward again. To ensure sunroof is fully closed,
press and hold switch until sunroof has completely
stopped moving.
Express Mode
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Next, press the switch
forward and release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the close position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof – Express
Press and hold the “V” button, and the sunroof will open
to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and will
occur regardless of the sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
147
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the
ignition has been turned off. The sunroof operation will
be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during
the 45 second time period.
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
There is a standard 12-Volt power outlet in the instrument panel and a 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) power
outlet in the center console on certain models for added
convenience. These outlets can power cell phones, electronics and other low power devices.
NOTE: Due to overload protection the inverter will shut
down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
• Do not use a 3 - Prong Adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use, and while driving
the vehicle
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
3
Power Outlet 12 Volts
Power Outlet 115 Volts (150 Watt)
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CONSOLE FEATURES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
Do not operate this vehicle with the console compartment lid in the open position. Cell phones, music
players, and other hand held electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.); will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
The floor console’s sliding armrest moves forward 3
inches to accommodate shorter drivers. The armrest lid
also includes a unique flip pocket for storing a phone or
an MP3 player. The bin inside the console can hold up to
10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out of sight.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light/Removable Self Recharging
Flashlight – If Equipped
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries when snapped back into place for convenience.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Floor Console
NOTE: The flip pocket and console lid features are
intended to be used in the upright or open position only
while the vehicle is parked. While driving, all handheld
devices should be properly stowed, and the flip pocket
and the console lid should be closed.
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press and Release
Removing Flashlight
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
3
Three Press Switch
Cargo Cover Extended
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. The Liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
cover in place.
4. Remove assembly from the vehicle.
Cargo Cover Removal
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Cargo Cover Removal
1. Detach the cargo area cover and allow it to retract.
2. Grasp cargo area cover assembly and push against
spring tension to the left.
3. Remove right side from cargo area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Removable Load Floor
The cargo area load floor is removable and can be
washed with mild soap and water. For removal, lift the
load floor with your finger at the space provided at the
rear.
155
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are four D-rings tie-down loops in the lower trim
for securing cargo. The tie-downs located on the cargo
area floor should be used to safely secure loads when
vehicle is moving.
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-down Loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
Removable Load Floor
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
Fold Down Speakers – If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
from the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
other activities.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
Fold Down Speakers
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
NOTE: Do not close the Liftgate with the fold down
speakers opened. The speakers could be damaged if they
come into contact with luggage stored in the cargo area.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the ON position will
activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
3
Rear Washer Wiper Control
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to park.
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten
minutes. For five more minutes of operation, press the
switch again. To prevent excessive battery drain, use the
defroster only when the engine is operating.
Rear Window Defroster
The push-button is located on
the bottom right side of the
blower control knob. Press
this button to turn on the rear
window defroster. An amber
light shows that the defroster
is on.
Rear Wiper Heater Grid
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window
to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe
distance from the window to prevent damaging the
heating elements.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity.
159
This vehicle is not equipped with roof rack cross rails as
built, unless ordered as optional equipment. Cross rails
must be installed prior to carrying loads on the roof rack.
If not equipped, your authorized dealer can order and
install Mopart cross rails built specifically for this roof
rack system or a number of after market rails that are
tailored to your lifestyle or activities.
NOTE: The optional cross rails have seven specific
locations identified by a feature on both the side rail and
the cross rail. Cross rails must be secured in one of the
seven detent locations on the side rail to prevent movement with a sudden stop. For improved wind noise
performance when cross rails are not in use, place them
in detent positions #2 (second detent from the front of the
vehicle) and #7 (detent closest to the rear of the vehicle)
as indicated with a unique feature on the side rails.
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO NOT
carry any loads on the roof rack without cross rails
installed. The load should be secured and placed on top
of the cross rails, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or
some other protection between the load and the roof
surface.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
“Cautions” when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the rated load capacity of your cross rail system
or the roof rack system maximum load capacity of 150
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both
the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially
true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the
cargo or your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
m Instrument Cluster—Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
m Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
m Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . . 178
m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4
162
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
m Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
m Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,
And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 197
m Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And
Hands Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 189
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 195
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free
Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
m Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc)
Radio With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ REC Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Audio Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, And RAQ,
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 216
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
163
▫ PTY Button 9Scan9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ PTY Button 9Seek9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
m Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 218
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
m CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 220
m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Air Filtration System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlet
—Demisters
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Glove Box
Storage Bin
Climate Controls
Heated Seat Switches — If Equipped
9 — Hazard Warning Flasher
10 — ESP OFF Switch — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
165
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—PREMIUM
4
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Location
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel pump symbol
points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located
2. Voltage Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the Charging System light remains on,
or comes on while driving, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain
SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your authorized dealer.
3. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, however see your dealer for service
as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is
normal. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Oil Pressure Warning Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come
on and remain on when the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
not come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7.
5. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons, the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
167
6. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
7. Airbag Warning Light
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
come on during starting, stays on, or comes on
while driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
8. Turn Signal Indicator Light
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
9. High Beam Indicator Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Push the turn signal lever away from the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
12. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
13. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the engine
will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
14. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, there is a low brake fluid level
or there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
169
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
15. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
During sustained high speed driving on hot
days, the automatic transaxle oil may become
too hot. If this happens, the transmission overheat indicator light will come on and the
vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle
cools down enough to allow a return to the requested
speed. If the high speed is maintained, the overheating
will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion.
16. Security Alarm System Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed.
17. Temperature Gauge
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
171
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
20. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
21. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset.
18. Cruise Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
19. Cruise SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is
SET.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. 4WD Indicator Light
This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD locked mode.
24. Odometer/Trip Odometer
A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster will display,
173
replacing the odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning
messages such as: door/gate ajar and loose gas cap.
Loose gas cap will be displayed from the Odometer/Trip
Odometer on all models.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, all warnings including “door”, and “gATE”
will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For additional
information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped” in Section 3.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Change Oil Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message
will continue to display each time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button
on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
25. OFF ROAD Indicator Light — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4WD lock
switch is activated and the transmission range indicator
is in Low or Reverse position.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and
automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
175
27. Hill Descent Indicator Light — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
4WD lock switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in Low or Reverse
position (Off Road Mode).
28. Front Fog Light Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
29. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS — if
equipped.
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
30. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined
with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
31. 4WD! Warning Light
This light monitors the Four -Wheel-Drive
(4WD) system. The light will come on, for a
bulb check, when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
3 seconds.
When lit solid: There is an 4WD system fault. 4WD
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the 4WD
system soon.
When blinking: The 4WD system is temporarily disabled due to overload condition.
32. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display—If
Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
33. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Button—If Equipped
Pushing this button, will change the display to the
choices available for EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
177
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
• Compass heading
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system displays — If Equipped
• Audio mode display
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
EVIC Location
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine temperature gauge. The EVIC consists of the following:
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
(automatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmissions).
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Gate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Headlamps On
• Key In Ignition
• Check TPM System
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
179
EVIC Functions
4
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
EVIC Button
Press the EVIC button until one of the following functions are displayed on the EVIC:
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Average Fuel Economy
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Elapsed Time
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature and the current radio
station.
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur
if a resettable function is currently being displayed. To
reset all resettable functions, press and release the EVIC
button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the
currently displayed function (Reset ALL will be displayed during this 3 second window).
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
in this section.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text
display of 9LOW FUEL9. This display will continue until
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the 9LOW FUEL9 text
and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the
current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel
tank level.
181
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to Section 5, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) for system operation.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions).
Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings
is displayed in the EVIC.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depending on availability. As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language.
NOTE: UConnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF
EQUIPPED section of this manual for details.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
(automatic transmissions). Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to
unlock the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in
this display until “DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST” or “ALL
DOORS” appears to make your selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
selection.
Delay Turning Headlamps Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
183
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and hold
the EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, power sunroof, and
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a
vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “Off”, “45 sec.”,
“5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make your selection.
Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make
your selection.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected all voice commands from the
U-Connect system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF”
appears to make your selection.
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and Metric.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. In order to ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be set to the zone number on the
compass variance map that corresponds to the current
location of the vehicle.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Instrument Panel. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
185
To Set the Variance: with the ignition in the ON position,
with a short button press (less than one second) press and
release the EVIC button several times until you have
displayed the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) menu. Once in the Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) menu, press and
release (less than one second) the EVIC button several
times until “Compass Variance” is highlighted. The
“Compass Variance” message and the current variance
zone number will be displayed. To change the zone, press
and hold (longer than two seconds) the EVIC button to
increment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary,
with individual long (for at least 1 second) EVIC button
presses for each increment, until the desired variance is
achieved. To exit the Variance Programming, press the
EVIC button with a short (less than one second) button
press.
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During programming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
Compass Calibration
The Compass will automatically calibrate if the Cal
indicator is flashing, by driving around slowly (under 5
mph / 8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in an area
free from large metallic objects or power lines, until the
Cal indicator turns off. If during normal use the compass
appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal, you may wish to
manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
compass make sure the proper zone is selected.
To Manually Calibrate the Compass: start the engine
and leave the transmission in the PARK position. Using a
short button press (less than one second), press and
release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC
displays the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) menu. Once in the Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features) menu, press and release (less
than one second) the EVIC button several times until
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed. Using a long
button press (more than one second), pressing the EVIC
button will place the Compass in calibration mode. The
Cal indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC
display to indicate that the compass is now in the
calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven
to calibrate. (A short EVIC button press from the 9Calibrate Compass (Yes)9 screen will exit the EVIC Customer
Programmable features, and return it to its normal operating mode). To complete the compass calibration, drive
the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles
under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from power lines,
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off.
The compass will now function normally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
187
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is accurately maintained.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one
of the two, time or frequency is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
189
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
REF Radio
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
191
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
193
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
195
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK position to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
197
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
RAQ Radio
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
199
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
16 Digit-Character
Display
None
Adult_Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic_Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign_Language
Information
Jazz
News
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft_Rock
Soft_R_&_B
Sports
Talk
Top_40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
201
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
203
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the
CD into the player.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If the
CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio, the
radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout. If the
CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will remain in CD mode and display 9INSERT
DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted within 10
seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be displayed.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
205
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
207
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
is loading.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
9INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
9elapsed time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
209
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
211
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup”
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
screen appears.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
REC Setting the Clock
GPS Clock
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
Clock” and press ENTER.
3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
ENTER.
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.
1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed
Clock: User Defined Clock”.
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
213
1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the
TIME button on the navigation faceplate.
2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen.
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
Audio Clock Display
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
audio screens.
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press
TIME again.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
215
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, and RAQ, Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word 9SCAN9 will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
217
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button (SEEK(
When the desired program is obtained, press the 9SEEK9
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
PTY Button (SCAN(
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
9SCAN9 button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the 9SCAN9
button a second time to stop the search.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
the antenna.
NOTE: Pressing the 9SEEK9 or 9SCAN9 button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
219
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls
The Climate Control System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Climate Control Location
221
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
The controls are as follows:
Fan Control
Use this control to regulate
the amount of air forced
through the system in any
mode you select. The fan
speed increases as you move
the control to the right from
the OFF position.
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The mode control allows you
to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the
symbols, or a blend of two of
these modes. The closer the
control is to a particular mode,
the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed.
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
necessary.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
air flow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passengers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
223
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate
the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the
A/C and recirculate buttons
at the same time.
NOTE: See “Circulation Control” later in this section,
for proper or extended use of this position.
Air Conditioning (Normal)
Use this button to engage the
Air Conditioning. A lamp will
illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged.
Once the air conditioning is
engaged, use a combination
of the mode control, fan
speed control, and temperature control to achieve your
desired interior temperature.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Circulation Control
Use this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside
the vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode. Only use the recirculate mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust and to cool the
interior rapidly upon initial
start up in very hot or humid
weather.
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
225
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
NOTE: Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix
or defrost modes.
Air Filtration System – If Equipped
An air filter is included in the optional Security Group.
Filter media includes a particle filtration layer and a
charcoal layer. The filter will reduce, but not eliminate,
diesel and agricultural smells. The filter acts only on air
coming from outside the vehicle; it does not filter air
inside the passenger compartment. See the maintenance
schedule for the filter change interval. The air filter
change interval coincides with engine oil and filter
change intervals. As with oil changes, the interval is
shorter for heavy duty service or dusty conditions. See
your authorized dealer for service.
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
Window Fogging
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, set mode
to the mix or defrost position. Direct the panel outlets
toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without
A/C for long periods as fogging may occur.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a highquality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is
recommended.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by using the defrost position.
Outside Air Intake
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collecting on the inside surface of the glass.
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the
inside because of moisture build up inside the
vehicle. For maximum defogging, press the
recirculation button until recirculate is off.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
m Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 239
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below 220°F Or 229°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
m Manual Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable
Automatic Transaxle (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
m Four Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . . . 242
m Freedom Drive II – Safe Off-Road Driving . . . . . 243
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
5
230
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Freedom Drive II 4WD System Operation . . . . 245
▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Freedom Drive II – Off-Road Features . . . . . . . 245
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ High Mobility Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Water Fording Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The
4WD Lock Lever Engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation . . 251
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . 261
m Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 277
STARTING AND OPERATING
231
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 278
m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
m Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
m Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Base System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
m Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
5
232
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 311
m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 307
m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 319
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transaxle
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the gear
selector in N (Neutral).
233
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
NOTE: If key won’t turn and steering wheel is locked,
rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on
the locking mechanism and then turn the key.
Automatic Transaxle
The gear selector must be in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of P (Park).
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the “START’” position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
5
234
STARTING AND OPERATING
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
Extremely Cold Weather (below 220°F or 229°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
235
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5
236
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelerator pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transaxle is in 1st gear, (not 3rd), when starting
from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can result
from starting in 3rd gear.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into R (Reverse) until the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
5 – Speed Shift Pattern
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in table.
Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds
Units in mph (km/h)
AccelEngine
eration 1 to 2 2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
Size
Rate
Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)
All
Engines Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
237
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to 2nd or 1st gear when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened.
5
238
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into P (Park) only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
Automatic Shift Lever
• Do not shift from R (Reverse), P (Park), or N (Neutral)
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of P (Park).
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
(Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of P (Park) and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always depress the
brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of
P (Park).
239
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not
shift out of park. Battery power is required to release the
brake/transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug in the right side of the shifter housing that
allows you to insert your finger to override the system.
The key must be in the ignition and in the on position to
use the override lever. If this occurs obtain service as
soon as possible.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in P (Park). It also prevents shifting out
of P (Park) unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions,
and the brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
5
240
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable
Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) positions into another gear range.
P (Park)
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use P
(Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always
apply the parking brake first, and then place the selector
in P (Park) position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
241
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P
(Park) position:
R (Reverse)
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• When shifting into P (Park), firmly move the lever all
the way forward until it stops.
N (Neutral)
Engine may be started in this range.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the shifter bezel
to ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
D (Drive)
• You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the
steering wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, damage to the steering column or shifter could
result. You must also depress the brake pedal.
This should be used for most driving and provides the
best ratio for optimum driveability, fuel economy, and
performance.
L (Low)
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, the transaxle will ratio up only to prevent transaxle damage or
engine over speed while ratioing down will occur as
early as possible
5
242
STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time, on-demand, Four Wheel
Drive (4WD).
Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if additional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose
traction surfaces, activate the 4WD LOCK switch by
pulling up once and releasing. This locks the center
coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear
wheels. The amber 94WD Indicator Light” will come on
in the cluster. This can be done on the fly, at any vehicle
speed. To deactivate, simply pull on the switch one more
time. The 94WD Indicator Light” will then go out.
NOTE: Refer to ”ESP (Electronic Stability Program) in
the “Electronic Brake Control System” section of this
manual for additional information.
Four Wheel Drive Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
FREEDOM DRIVE II – SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING
Off-Road Driving Tips and Vehicle Characteristics
The Freedom Drive II Off-Road Package has excellent on
and off-road capabilities. These off-road capabilities will
allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few
travel, providing a source of exciting and satisfying
recreation. Before you venture out you should contact
your local governmental agency to determine what are
the designated off-road vehicle (ORV) trails or recreation
areas. You should always tread lightly and only use
established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas. The
National Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management or
local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of
information and usually have maps with marked trails.
243
NOTE: For optimum off-road performance, premium
fuel is recommended. However, your vehicle is
equipped with an active spark knock system and can
adjust the engine calibration for varying range of fuel
octane levels.
The Freedom Drive II Off-Road Package
The Freedom Drive II Off-Road Package provides excellent capability on and off-road.
The package includes:
• 2.4L DOHC 16-Valve I4 (172 bhp @ 6000 rpm, 165 lb-ft
@ 4400 rpm)
• Second generation continuously variable transaxle
(CVT2L) with 19:1 crawl ratio
5
244
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tow Hooks: 2 front and 1 rear
• Front engine and transaxle skid plate
• Fuel tank skid plate
• Air filtration system
• Unique springs for a 1 inch of increased ride height
• Fog lamps
• Seat height adjust
• Unique off-road engine calibration for optimum offroad performance with premium fuel
• Off-road Brake Traction Control
• Unique off-road Anti-lock brake calibration
• Heavy duty cooling package (Eng/larger CVT oil
cooler, High capacity cooling fans)
• Heavy duty alternator
• Three-mode Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
• Improved body sealing and high located drivetrain
component vents
• Hill-descent control
• Reinforced rear lateral links
STARTING AND OPERATING
Freedom Drive II 4WD System Operation
Under normal driving conditions, the vehicle operates in
the active four wheel drive mode. Pulling up on the 4WD
lock lever activates the 4WD system and lights the amber
4WD cluster light. This commands a higher torque to the
rear wheels, for improved traction capability on slippery
roads. The active four wheel drive mode has the same
functionality with the Freedom Drive I system. Shifting
the transaxle gear select lever into Low Off-Road mode
with the 4WD lock lever active, lights the amber off-road
and 4WD cluster lights. This off-road mode gives the
combined benefits of a 19:1 crawl ratio, hill descent
braking, optimum off-road performance with premium
fuel, and off-road brake traction control for improved
traction capability off-road. In low, the transaxle (CVT2L)
initially maintains the 19:1 crawl ratio before changing
ratio. This low ratio is ideal for crawling over obstacles.
245
Freedom Drive II – Off-Road Features
The following are key off-road features which are active
when the system has the 4WD lock lever engaged and is
in the Low Off-Road mode.
• Hill Descent Braking – Hill descent braking uses the
vehicle braking system to provide a controlled descent
down varying grades. This feature is only active when
the system has the 4WD lock lever engaged and is in
the Low Off-Road mode or reverse. Hill descent
braking can be turned off by turning off ESP. The hill
decent control speed varies between 4-6 mph (6 -10
km/h) forward, 3 mph (5 km/h) reverse.
• Off-Road Brake Traction Control – When conditions
warrant, the vehicle braking system transfers torque
from side to side. It does not control throttle input
unlike normal traction control which is active in
normal drive mode.
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
• 19.1 Crawl Ratio – When the system has the 4WD lock
lever engaged and is in the Low Off-Road mode, the
CVT2L initially maintains the 19:1 crawl ratio before
changing ratio. This low ratio is ideal for crawling over
obstacles.
changes to run higher spark advance with premium
fuel for optimum off-road performance. Your vehicle is
equipped with an active spark knock system and can
adjust the engine calibration for varying range of fuel
octane levels.
• 4WD Lock Mode – Four wheel drive lock mode
commands a higher torque to the rear wheels, for
improved traction capability off-road. It also, turns on
other system features in conjunction with L Off-Road
mode.
High Mobility Characteristics
The Freedom Drive II Off-Road package has high offroad mobility characteristics with an approach angle A=
29 degrees, a break-over angle B= 23 degrees, a running
ground clearance C= 9 ins. (23 cm), a departure angle D=
33 degrees, and a turning circle of 35.6 ft. (11 m).
• Unique Engine Calibration – When the system has
the 4WD lock lever engaged and is in the Low
Off-Road mode or reverse, the engine calibration
STARTING AND OPERATING
247
5
Angles A B C D
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to cross
a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain
are safe from water ingestion. The Freedom Drive II
Off-Road package has high water fording characteristics
with the ability to cross a pool of water, without stopping,
19 ins. (48 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
STARTING AND OPERATING
249
5
Water Fording Characteristics
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
The Basics of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving offroad. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
When To Use Low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD
Lock Lever Engaged
When To Use Low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock
Lever Engaged When driving off-road, shift into low (L
Off-Road) and activate the 4WD Lock. This will provide
STARTING AND OPERATING
additional traction and activates the numerous off-road
features to improve handling and control on slippery or
difficult terrain. Due to the sustained lower gearing, low
(L Off-Road) with 4WD Lock engaged will allow the
engine to operate in a higher power range. This will
allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills, with
improved control and less effort.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
steep incline.
251
Driving in Snow, Mud and Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, activate the 4WD Lock and
shift the transmission to a low (L Off-Road) if necessary. Don’t shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin
the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than
a 1/4; turn quickly back and forth, while still applying
throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh 9bite9
and help maintain your momentum.
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine rpm’s or vehicle speeds because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
• Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get through.
You should use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock
engaged and maintain your momentum. If you start to
slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no
more than a 1/4; turn quickly back and forth for
additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are
normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting
stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are
any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through
with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots
in a trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do
not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is to use the
appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s
momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft
sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a
minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
surface area. You should use low (L Off-Road) with the
4WD Lock engaged and ESP turned off. Reduced tire
pressure will drastically improve your traction and
handling, while driving on the soft sand, but you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving
STARTING AND OPERATING
on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have
a way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the
pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
253
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle.
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side
wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with
your tires.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a roll over. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
STARTING AND OPERATING
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of roll over when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
255
CAUTION!
Do not attempted to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance or the
vehicle will become high centered.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
5
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a
hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is
too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill
side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on
top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches
or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover
the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, then you should
use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock engaged and
proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as
you climb the hill
• Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your
ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle
and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not
race forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of
grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end
begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring
all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the
crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed
over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach
the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the steering wheel no more than
STARTING AND OPERATING
a 1/4; turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a
fresh 9bite9 into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not
make it to the top, place the vehicle in reverse and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
257
distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the
vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident in your
ability to proceed then make sure you are in low (L
Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock engaged and proceed
with caution. Allow engine and hill descent braking to
control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary,
but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in
severe injury.
• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe
descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in neutral. Use vehicle
brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control
and be seriously injured.
• Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places
more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
the possibilities of a down hill slide or roll over. Make
sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll
over, which may result in severe injury.
• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall
or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,
allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift to R
(Reverse). Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
and hill descent braking to control the descent and
apply your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the
tires to lock
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in R (Reverse) gear. Never back down a hill in N
(Neutral) using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or
down.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only
be attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water
first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You want
to use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD Lock engaged and
proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed {3-5 mph
(5–8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of
the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle
fluids for signs of water ingestion.
259
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy.
5
• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you
approach any type of water you need to determine if
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a
stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or
muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or
muddy waters. These water types normally contain
hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.
If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than
proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
• Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running
stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving
water can easily push your vehicle downstream
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water,
a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths greater
than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition
and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle
heading slightly upstream using the low and slow
technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
261
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or
form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and
vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like
rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will
need to experiment to determine what is right for your
situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to
replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remember you must return the tires to normal air pressure
before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure
you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road
air pressure.
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at
a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Vehicle Recovery
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
recovery should always be given consideration before
attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go
off-road driving without the ability to recover your
vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with
you usually works best for most situations. The first
thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?
Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go
forward or to go backward? Can you still move the
vehicle? Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to
help? Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the
recovery process? Answering these questions will help
you determine the best method of recovery. If you can
still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick
ground, then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first
choice. If you have ample room, an additional vehicle
and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the
surroundings, then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow
hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is severely
hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be
taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on
something you should jack the vehicle up and stack
something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll
off the object without causing further damage. This
should be tried before attempting any recovery method.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first
clearing the object, may result in additional underbody damage.
263
and on the accelerator before and after the shift. If after
a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try
another method of recovery. Continuous rock cycling
will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle
and the environment.
CAUTION!
• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly
used methods. This simply involves shifting your
vehicle from drive to reverse, while applying throttle
after each shift. During this process, for additional
traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly back
and forth no more than a 1/4 turn. If you are stuck in
mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during this
process to clean the debris from the tread and improve
the traction. You want to create a rocking motion with
the vehicle. This helps build vehicle momentum,
which hopefully gets you out. Remember to ease off
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster
than an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h)
• Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow
straps are a quick and easy way to recover your
vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary
vehicle which is not stuck. The tow hooks on your
vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper
or any other vehicle component as an attachment
5
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
point. Using tow straps requires coordination between
the two drivers. Good communication and line of sight
are required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow
strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles.
There should be a least 20 to 30 ft. (6 to 9 m) between
the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary
join two tow straps together using a 1 1/2 in. (4 cm)
hard wood dowel. This will keep the straps from
becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin
if the strap breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup,
leaving 2 to 3 ft. (61 to 91 cm) worth of slack in the
strap. Then the tow vehicle, using light throttle, should
accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling
force needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle being
recovered should assist in the recovery, at the time of
the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in the same
direction as the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle
becomes free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their
brakes stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without using the
brakes, once signaled by the other driver. This sequence is important to avoid having the recovered
vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects
could become projectiles if a strap breaks, which
could cause severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to
3 ft. (61 to 91 cm) of slack in the strap. More slack
than this greatly increases the risk of injury and
vehicle damage. Always keep everyone at least 30 ft.
(9 m) away from a strapping or winching situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
265
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After driving off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have brake drums and rotors,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
packed material. Packed foreign material can cause a
wheel imbalance and cleaning the wheels will correct
the situation.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard, or they might hide
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,
and propeller shafts.
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent an accident. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary. Failure to do so may result
is serious injury.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
267
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position
(automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle). To
release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal, pull up
slightly on the lever, then depress the button on the end
of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the
floor.
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a
uphill grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.
WARNING!
Parking Brake Lever
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park. As
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING
269
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system operating.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
5
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
271
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
273
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
5
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING
275
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
9....blank....9 = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
277
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
279
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs.
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
281
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
283
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
5
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the
outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
285
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread
life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
STARTING AND OPERATING
287
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
WARNING!
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
289
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension
components. You could lose control and have an
accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
291
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram.
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
• The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the lowpressure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through
the tire.
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km)
after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires –
General Information” in this section for information
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
• The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) — IF EQUIPPED
STARTING AND OPERATING
− For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is
27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26
psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
293
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Base System – If Equipped
This is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warning indicator located in the instrument cluster.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
light.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
STARTING AND OPERATING
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 kph) to receive
this information.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
295
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
by any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due
to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
297
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
5
• Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. In
addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display a graphic of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) flashing.
Low Tire Pressure Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 kph) to receive this information.
Check TPM System Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message for 3 seconds. This text message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of the
pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
Check TPM System Display
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9
STARTING AND OPERATING
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
299
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due
to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
GASOLINE ENGINES
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular
gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in
poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
301
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
STARTING AND OPERATING
303
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
Fuel System Cautions
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
305
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “GASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip
odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Rear Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 lbs. (80 kg)
Vehicle Rated Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . 925 lbs. (420 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes the weigh of your vehicle, the driver,
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue weight. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
307
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
STARTING AND OPERATING
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
309
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package
content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
311
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
2.4L Auto/Man
22 Sq. Ft. (2.04 Sq. m)
2.4L Auto/Man with Trailer
32 Sq. Ft. (3.0 Sq. m)
Tow Prep Package (AHC)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
1000 lbs (453 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note 1)
150 lbs (68 kg)
2000 lbs (907 kg)
225 lbs (102 kg)
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
313
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to Section 8 of this manual. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR,
ratings.
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
315
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
5
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
STARTING AND OPERATING
317
5
4 - Pin Connector
7- Pin Connector
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for transmission fluid
change intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
319
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
m If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
m Jump-Starting Procedures Due To A Low
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
m Automatic Transaxle Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . 324
m Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6
322
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
Hazard Warning Flasher
The flasher switch is located on the instrument
panel, below the radio. Depress the switch and
both cluster indicators and all front and rear
directional signals will flash. Depress the
switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
323
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
6
324
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transaxle oil may
become too hot.
If this happens, the transmission overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the automatic transaxle
cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating will reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the cargo area.
325
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the
cargo area.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING!
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
326
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jacking Locations
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in step 3.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear
jacking locations on each side of the body. The front
locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear
ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped
with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose
the jacking locations in the body.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
327
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel (and
bolt-on center cap if equipped) off the hub. Install the
spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
6
328
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
BATTERY
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
329
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way and may be damaged.
Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged
battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
6
330
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in
the On position will cause vehicles with an automatic
transaxle (CVT2) to go into “default mode” and turn on
the malfunction indicator light. See your authorized
dealer to correct this condition.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place automatic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEUTRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Remove the air intake duct covering the battery, using
the two finger screws on the cover.
5. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t
lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the
clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the contaminated area immediately
with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from
the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
volts.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of
the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good
contact.
331
7. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobilizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
8. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
9. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control or ESP, turn the system OFF before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
6
332
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle, tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
And don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continuously for more than 30 seconds.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Automatic And Manual Transaxle
Front-wheel-drive vehicles must have the front wheels
elevated; Four-wheel-drive vehicles must be hauled on a
flatbed truck.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY position, not in the LOCK position.
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
333
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Battery power is required to release the brake/
transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug
in the right side of the shifter housing that allows you to
insert your finger to override the system. The ignition
key must be in the on position to use the override lever.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Engine Compartment — Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Drive Belt – Check Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 348
m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Air Cleaner Element (Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
7
336
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 361
▫ Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Automatic Transaxle (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA )– AWD/4WD
Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD
Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
m Fuses/Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . 373
m Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
m Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
m Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup
Lights — Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ License Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . 383
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
337
▫ Auxiliary Off-Road Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
m Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
m Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 386
7
338
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — GASOLINE
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transaxle control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
339
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
7
340
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possible loose or
improperly installed. A GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
reset button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
341
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
7
342
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
WARNING!
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
343
7
Engine Oil Dipstick
344
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a crosshatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of
oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated
range will result in the oil level at the full end of the
indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine as
indicated by the range markings, as described above,
on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration,
which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase
in oil temperature. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
recommended engine oil change intervals.
Engine Oil Selection (Gasoline Engines)
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil
filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine.
345
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
7
346
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Drive Belt – Check Condition
Check the drive belt condition. Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual.
Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace belt if any sign of damage which
could result in belt failure.
The belt is self-tensioning and will not need adjustment.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for spark plug information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving
engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance,
have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and the vehicle.
347
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
348
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for prolonged period.
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
service.
Air Cleaner Element (Filter)
Replace the filter at the intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to Section 8 of this manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
349
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
CAUTION!
When servicing the battery, always reinstall the battery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides battery
heat protection and will extend overall battery life.
Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in
evaporative loss of the battery fluid.
7
350
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
351
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
7
352
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” for correct fluid types.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints whenever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must
be replaced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
353
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
7
354
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
2. Push the release tab and slide the wiper blade assembly down along the arm. Gently place the wiper arm on
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
Windshield Washer Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the right side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze).
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
355
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
7
356
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule,”
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled. Refer
to Section 8 of this manual.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to “ Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” for correct
coolant type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolants,
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon
as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
357
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
234°F (237°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
7
358
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the
bottle.
359
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
7
360
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure the are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
361
Fuel System Connections
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance Section.
7
362
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake And Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to examining those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil
change.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
363
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual
Transaxle , the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to
both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System.
The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak
in one system will not affect the other system. The
Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If
the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system
does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be
a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System.
See your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for correct
fluid type.
7
364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged
braking. You could have an accident.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid as seal damage will result!
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid which has been formulated with special metal to
metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper
steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” for correct
fluid type.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will cause belt slip and
result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for correct
fluid type.
365
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked only by a trained technician.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for the correct change interval.
Special Additives
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) Fluid
(CVTF+4). CVTF+4 is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Manual Transaxle
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
for correct fluid type.
7
366
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more that 3/16” (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
following conditions exist:
• The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
immediately.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA )– AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” for correct fluid
type.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm)
below the fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” located in Section 8
of this manual for the correct change interval.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for correct fluid
type.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm)
below the fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” located in Section 8
of this manual for the correct change interval.
367
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
7
368
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
The most common causes are:
• Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
369
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar
cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
7
370
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopart Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopart Multi-purpose
cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a
fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
371
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
7
372
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
section of the owner’s manual for the underhood location
of the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
1
Empty
2
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
3
10 Amp
Red
4
10 Amp
Red
5
20 Amp
Yellow
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
6
10 Amp
Red
7
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
8
Description
9
Empty
AWD/4WD ECU Feed
10
CHMSL Brake Switch
Feed
Ignition Switch Feed
11
Trailer Tow
13
12
40 Amp
Green
373
Description
IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/Ocm
Steering Cntrl Sdar/
Hands Free Phone
IOD Sense1
IOD Sense2
Power Seats
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
CCN Power Locks
Power Outlet
Ign Run/Acc Inverter
Pwr run/Acc Outlet
RR
7
374
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
14
10 Amp
Red
15
40 Amp
Green
16
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
17
10 Amp
Red
18
40 Amp
Green
19
20 Amp
Yellow
20
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
21
10 Amp
Red
Description
IOD CCN/ Interior
Lighting
RAD Fan Relay Battery Feed
IGN Run/Acc Cigar
Ltr/Sunroof
IOD Feed Mod-Wcm
ASD Relay Contact
PWR Feed
PWR Amp 1 & Amp 2
Feed
IOD Feed Radio
IOD Feed Intrus Mod/
Siren
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
22
10 Amp
Red
23
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
24
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
25
10 Amp
Red
26
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
27
10 Amp
Red
28
10 Amp
Red
29
Description
IGN RUN Heat/AC/
Compass Sensor
ENG ASD Relay Feed
3
Power Sunroof Feed
Heated Mirror
ENG ASD Relay Feed
2
IGN RUN Only ORC
Feed
IGN RUN ORC/OCM
Feed
Hot Car (No Fuse Required)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
30
20 Amp
Yellow
31
10 Amp
Red
32
30 Amp
Pink
33
10 Amp
Red
34
30 Amp
Pink
35
40 Amp
Green
36
30 Amp
Pink
37
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Heated Seats
Headlamp Washer Relay Control
ENG ASD Control
Feed 1
ABS MOD/J1962
Conn/PCM
ABS Valve Feed
ABS Pump Feed
Headlamp /Washer
Control / Smart Glass
110 Inverter
375
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
7
376
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
You may:
• Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Front Header Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Center Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Rear Cargo/Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–A35LF
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Low Beam/High Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Light . 3157AK or
3157A
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . LED Assembly
Rear Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AK or 3757A
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W (921)
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Off-Road Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
377
• Raise the hood and locate connector behind the headlamp.
7
Locating Headlamp Connector
Releasing Red Lock Tab
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out
at connector.
Twisting Bulb From Socket
Remove green connector from back of bulb by
pulling straight back
• Twist the bulb to the left and pull outward from
assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb
life.
379
Fog Lights
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup
Lights — Replacement
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.
7
Removing Halogen Bulb From Assembly
Removing Push-Pins
380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly to disengage the
lamp from the aperture panel.
Push-Pins Removed
Pulling Lamp From Body
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
Removing Socket and Bulb
381
4. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
Removing Bulb From Socket
7
382
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Lights
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
Removing Socket from Lamp
Prying Lamp from Liftgate
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull bulb from socket.
383
Auxiliary Off-Road Light
1. Remove the three screws attaching the lens to the
housing.
7
Removing Bulb From Socket
Center High-Mounted Stoplight
Light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer for
replacement.
Lens Removal
384
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unlatch the wire clasp securing the bulb into the
housing and rotate it into the position shown.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the lamp harness to replace
the bulb.
Releasing the bulb
Disconnecting bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
385
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil-With Filter
All Gasoline Engines (Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil.)
Cooling System *
Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Miles Formula), or equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
13.5 Gallons
Metric
51.0 Liters
4.5 Quarts
4.26 Liters
7.2 Quarts
6.8 Liters
7
386
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Mopart 04884900AB or equivalent.
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043”)
87 Octane (R + M)/2
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
387
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Mopart CVTF + 4
Mopart ATF+4 MS9602
Mopart Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent nonsynthetic product.
Mopart Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent nonsynthetic product.
Mopart DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Mopart Power Steering Fluid +4 or MopartATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 390
m Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 393
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
390
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation condition the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message
after completing the scheduled oil change. If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use Factory
391 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
At Each Stop for Fuel
N
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully C
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or under
“Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument Cluster
Descriptions section of this manual.
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the C
H
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if D
U
required.
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
392
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
At Each Oil Change
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the Manual Transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
393 M
Required Maintenance Intervals
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires.
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty
or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect Exhaust System. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, replace if necessary.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Miles
6,000
6,000
Kilometers
10 000
10 000
or Months
6
6
12,000
20 000
12
12,000
12,000
20 000
20 000
12
12
24,000
40 000
24
24,000
40 000
24
24,000
40 000
24
30,000
50 000
30
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N
T
E
N Maintenance Items
A
N Replace the spark plugs (2.0L/2.4L Engines).
C Change the manual transmission fluid if using your
E vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or
more then 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid.
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid.
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Replace the timing belt (2.4L engines).
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Miles
30,000
Kilometers
50 000
or Months
30
48,000
80 000
48
60,000
60,000
100 000
100 000
60
60
60,000
100 000
60
90,000
102,000
102,000
150 000
170 000
170 000
90
60
102
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
395 M
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter.
Replace Accessory Drive Belt(s).
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Miles
120,000
120,000
Kilometers
200 000
200 000
or Months
120
120
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 401
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
9
398
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
399
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
400
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
401
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
9
402
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
403
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
9
404
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call Toll Free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
405
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
408
INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 357
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,158
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 348
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,352
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,351
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,54
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,56,69,167
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,53
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,170
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 356,385,386
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,270
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,28
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . 12,233,238,324,365
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
INDEX
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 24
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,361
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,130,270
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,361
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 67
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376,377
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
409
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 385
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,345
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cargo Compartment
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,197
10
410
INDEX
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 220
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,220
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . 340
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,191,199,211
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385,386
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,359
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,359
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
INDEX
Crankcase Emission Control System
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . .
...
....
....
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
348
171
150
398
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,222
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Drive Belts . . . . . . . .
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt
Driving
Off-Pavement . . . . .
Off-Road . . . . . . . .
On Slippery Surfaces
411
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 126
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 177
10
412
INDEX
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 340,390
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,338
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,385,386
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,345
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 55
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,68,304,354,355
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,386
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
INDEX
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 386
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,175,379
Fold Down Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,386
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Filter . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . .
Hoses . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . .
Requirements . . .
System Hoses . . .
Tank Capacity . .
Fuel System Caution
Fueling . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
413
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
348
301
166
361
167
301
301
361
385
306
304
373
Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,306,340
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,385
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
10
414
INDEX
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,106,300
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,167
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 120
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,175
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 138
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,19
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
INDEX
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,326
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Key, Programming . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System (Sedan)
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
16
15
14
19
12
415
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 167,379
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Latches
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,116
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,56,69,167
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10
416
INDEX
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,137
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,175,379
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 174
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,119,167,379
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 166
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Maintenance Free Battery
Maintenance, General . . .
Maintenance Procedures .
Maintenance Schedule . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
349
343
343
390
INDEX
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 174,340
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,235,365
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,367
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,367
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365,366,367
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,401
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
417
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,385
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
10
418
INDEX
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,385
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339,340
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 5,403
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 278
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 148
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,352
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
INDEX
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,197,220
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,214
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,197
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Rear Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
419
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 218
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,65
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
10
420
INDEX
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,214
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 40
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,19
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
INDEX
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,191,199,211
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 228
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,325
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Speakers, Fold Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 126,171
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
421
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,352
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 47
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
10
422
INDEX
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 170,323
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 278
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,282,404
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,279
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273,282
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
INDEX
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,233,238,365
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,233,235
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
423
Transmission
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 138
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,167,379
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 164
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
10
424
INDEX
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,306
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,158
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,53
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,353
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 370
2008 Patriot
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
81-326-0812
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Patriot
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement